®
2019
OWNER’S MANUAL
FIAT 500e
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4
5
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
9
10
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
10
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .5
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FIAT 500e. Be
assured that your 500e represents an elegant marriage of
technology and Italian styling that is as good for the
environment as it is fun to drive!
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation, understanding and maintenance of
your 500e. It is supplemented by Warranty Information,
and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the
time to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Exterior Mirrors
2 — Windshield
3 — Underhood Compartment
4 — Headlights
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
REAR VIEW
2
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Steering Wheel
4 — Instrument Cluster
5 — Windshield Wiper Lever
6 — Radio
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
INTERIOR
2
Interior
1 — Door Handles
2 — Seats
3 — Switch Panel
4 — Climate Controls
5 — Gear Selector
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp) . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 500e ELECTRIC VEHICLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Charge Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Audible Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Single-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key With Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Auto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ E-Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Mechanical Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Climate Control (HVAC System) . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Electric Air Conditioning Compressor . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Electric Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Smartphone Features (Not Available In
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION . . . . .22
▫ SAE J1772 Charging Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp) . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
3
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Manual Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Manual Adjustment Front Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Manual Folding Rear Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . .52
▫ Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .56
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Spotter Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Interior Light Timing (Center Position) . . . . . . . .62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) . . . . . .62
▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Cargo Area Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Automatic Temperature Control Overview . . . . .66
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . .71
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Sun Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
3
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the vehicle. The
high voltage battery is maintenance free and designed to
last for the life of the vehicle.
NOTE: Upon exiting the vehicle, ensure the ignition is in
the off position and the key is removed from the vehicle.
High Voltage Battery and Cable Locations
1 — High Voltage Cables
2 — High Voltage Battery
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
• Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other types
of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
• Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only lose
approximately 3 percent of their charge per month.
• Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
• Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and discharged
thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
under the rear passenger seat lower cushion. If your
vehicle requires service, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Management
System that is designed to:
• Ensure safe operation
• Maximize driving range
• Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage battery
NOTE:
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
• During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking noise
may be heard from within the vehicle. When the ignition
key is turned to the on position, the high voltage battery
contactors inside the battery are closed to make the
stored electricity inside available for vehicle use. The
clicking noise observed is the sound of these contactors
as they open and close and is normal operation for your
500e.
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last the
life of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for information on the disposal of the battery if it should require
replacement.
• The operating temperature range of the high voltage
battery is -22 °F to 122 °F (-30 °C to 50 °C). If it is
attempted to operate the vehicle with the battery outside
of these temperature extremes it will not function.
Never try to remove the high voltage battery service
disconnect. The high voltage battery service disconnect
is used when your vehicle requires service by a trained
technician at an authorized dealer. Failure to follow
this warning can cause severe burns or electrical shock
that may result in serious injury or death.
3
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
500e ELECTRIC VEHICLE FEATURES
Understanding the unique characteristics of your 500e will
help ensure maximum performance and the best driving
range from your vehicle.
Your 500e is equipped with two electrical systems; a 12 Volt
system that is used to power the conventional electrical
system and a high voltage system, which is used to drive
the wheels through a single-speed transmission as well as
other high voltage system components.
Your 500e operates differently then a traditional vehicle or
Hybrid vehicle. Here are some of the main differences:
Audible Pedestrian Warning System
Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian
Warning System. The Audible Pedestrian Warning System
uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that your vehicle is
approaching.
The audible warning system uses an in-car sound synthesizer with a speaker located in the underhood compartment. The warning system is automatically activated when
selecting DRIVE or REVERSE.
In DRIVE range, the system will remain active until the
vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 22 mph
(35.5 km/h). At approximately 22 mph (35.5 km/h), the
warning system is deactivated and will automatically be
active when the vehicle returns to approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Single-Speed Transmission
Instead of a traditional transmission, your vehicle is
equipped with a single-speed transmission to transfer the
torque from the E-Drive motor to the drive wheels. This
transmission requires no maintenance and is designed to
operate for the life of the vehicle.
Auto Park
Auto Park will automatically place the transmission into
PARK if there is an indication that the driver may leave the
vehicle while still in the DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE
gear. Refer to “Single-Speed Transmission” in “Starting
And Operating” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
E-Park
The parking pawl is traditionally located inside an automatic transmission and activated when the vehicle is
placed in the PARK position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
E-Park is activated when the driver pushes the PARK
button. An electric motor activates the parking pawl and
locks the single-speed transmission when the vehicle is
placed into PARK. This will prevent any unwanted movement of the vehicle.
NOTE: The engagement of the E-Park can be heard when
there is no noise in the interior of the vehicle, this is a
normal condition.
Climate Control (HVAC System)
Your 500e is equipped with an Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) HVAC system. This HVAC system utilizes a
humidity sensor, cabin sensor, and ambient temperature
sensor to choose operation mode and control cabin comfort. These components allow the controller to operate the
HVAC system in a very efficient manner to maximize
driving range.
Your 500e also uses an electric air heater to provide heat to
the cabin.
Electric Air Conditioning Compressor
Your 500e uses an electric air conditioning compressor. The
air conditioning compressor is powered by the high voltage battery system and is used to cool the vehicle occupants and the high voltage battery while the vehicle is
being driven or when it is being charged.
The high voltage battery may require cooling to keep the
vehicle running. The air conditioning compressor activates
without any input from the occupant.
NOTE: The AC system helps cool the high voltage battery.
If the air conditioning system should require service, see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power Steering
(EPS) system. The power steering system requires no
maintenance and operates without the use of power steering fluid.
3
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Smartphone Features (Not Available In Canada)
With the Uconnect app, you can monitor the state of charge
of the high voltage battery or initiate charging from your
phone. You can also turn on your vehicle’s climate control
system remotely. The app provides the following features:
• Monitor battery charge level
• Display available driving distance
• Check charging status
• Remotely activate vehicle climate control system
• Unlock and lock doors
• Assist with locating your vehicle
• Locate charging stations
• Send a point-of-interest to your vehicle’s navigation
system
• Schedule a charge
• View energy consumed
• Notifications for charging and preconditioning events
How do I use the smartphone app?
From a mobile device or computer, visit
www.FIATaccess.com
Registration Website
Once in the registration website, you will need to enter
your vehicle’s VIN and Connectivity ID. The connectivity
ID is found in the vehicle’s instrument cluster. To locate the
connectivity ID follow the steps below:
1. Push the menu button on the instrument cluster.
2. Choose “Settings” and scroll down to the “Connectivity
ID.”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
3. Select “Connectivity ID.”
After obtaining the connectivity ID and VIN number
return to the vehicle registration website and perform the
following:
1. After entering the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number),
Connectivity ID and your email address, click “submit.”
2. You will now be asked to fill in your contact information
and a user name and password.
3. Once finished with registration you will be directed to
your 500e owner’s site.
4. From your smartphone, search for and download the
Uconnect App from the App Store (Apple iPhone) or
Google Play (Android mobile device).
5. To log in, use the username and password you used
during registration.
NOTE: You must register with Uconnect Access to use the
services. Uconnect Access services are operable only for
36–months beginning on the date of the retail sale of the
500e. At the end of the 36–month operability period, the
services will be deactivated and will become inoperable,
and the services will be unavailable. The 36–month operability period cannot be extended, renewed or restarted
under any circumstances. Services can only be used where
3G cellular coverage is available, visit DriveUconnect.com
to view the coverage map.
Need help with registration?
Please call the Uconnect Call Center Toll Free number
below:1-855-261-5364
3
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp)
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772
Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also
referred to as a charging cordset. AC Level 1 charging
requires a conventional NEMA 5-15 120 Volt AC grounded
wall receptacle along with the charging cordset provided
with the vehicle.
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772 charge
inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC Level 1 (120V) and
AC Level 2 (240V) charging.
SAE J1772 Charge Receptacle
NOTE: The charge inlet door locks and unlocks with the
vehicle doors.
Charging Cord Set
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
WARNING!
Shock, fire, property damage, or personal injury may
occur if the Portable EVSE Cordset is not used properly. There are no serviceable parts contained in the
Portable EVSE Cordset. Any attempt to service it may
result in shock, fire, property damage, or personal
injury.
To access the charging cordset, remove the Level 1 EVSE
from its storage bin by lifting the rear cargo cover.
EVSE Rear Cargo Location
NOTE: The charging cordset is used for AC Level 1
charging only.
3
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EVSE Charging Cordset
The EVSE charging cordset is compliant with SAE J1772,
and applicable for use with vehicles fitted with the standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The EVSE includes:
• An AC Power Cord with NEMA 5–15p, Right Angle
plug
• An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV- rated
• A Charge Connector
• A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a Charge Current
Interrupt Device (CCID) with status indicator display
Charging Cord Set
1 — Charge Connector
2 — Status Indicator Display
3 — Charging Cord Set Enclosure
4 — Charge Cable
5 — AC Plug
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Charging Cordset Operation
1. Plug the AC plug of the charging cordset into a 15A, or
20A, 120VAC, 60Hz, grounded wall receptacle. Do not
use an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a worn
outlet. The charging cordset will not operate safely
unless it is plugged directly into the wall receptacle.
AC Plug And Wall Receptacle
WARNING!
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor could result in a risk of electric shock. Check
with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in
doubt as to whether the wall receptacle is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the
product – if it does not fit the outlet, you must have a
proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
3
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Check to see if the charging cordset is ready to charge by
reviewing the indicator lights. After a brief self-check,
where the indicator light will flash, a green AC indicator
light and two green charge rate indicator lights indicate
that the cordset is ready for use.
when the charge connector is inserted correctly and
coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
Inserting The Charge Connector Into The Vehicle Charge
Inlet
Cordset Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Charge Rate Indicator
Lights
3. If the charging cordset is ready to charge, ensure the
vehicle is in PARK, and then connect the charge connector to the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click”
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the Charge Rate
Indicator Lights will cycle from left to right, and then
both turn off. This pattern will repeat while the vehicle
is charging. The lights are illuminated at the rate of
approximately one cycle per second.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
• Charging Cordset - The charging cordset status indicators illuminate green or red to identify the charging
cordset status. Refer to “Troubleshooting Using The
Status Indicator Display” in this section for further
information on the charging cordset status.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the vehicle side
connector first and then the charging cordset from the
wall receptacle. To disengage the vehicle coupler, push
the button on the charge connector (1) before removing
the connector from the vehicle charge inlet (2).
• Wall Receptacle – Check whether the wall receptacle is
functional (no power outage) and/or plug the charging cordset into a different wall receptacle.
• Charging Schedule – Check whether or not the charging schedules have been enabled. If enabled, check
that you are within the scheduled time and date. If a
charging schedule has been enabled and you are
outside the time and date, you may override the
schedule for this charging event by plugging in the
charge connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double
plug sequence within ten seconds for it to override the
set schedule.
Removing The Charge Connector From The Vehicle
Charge Inlet
6. Close the inlet door.
NOTE: It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF
position while conducting Level 1 Charging. This minimizes any additional vehicle loads the EVSE has to support
which extend the charging time.
3
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Using The Status Indicator Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The AC Power Indicator displays the status and safety of
the input power. If this indicator is green, the power is
within acceptable limits to charge the vehicle. If only the
AC Power Indicator is flashing red, then there is a problem
with the AC power at the electrical outlet. If the AC Power
Indicator does not return to green, then the outlet should
be inspected by a licensed electrician to ensure the voltage,
frequency, and grounding are complaint to national and
local electrical codes and ordinances. It may be possible to
attempt charging from a different outlet.
The Fault Indicator displays the status of the Portable
EVSE Cordset and the vehicle connection. The Portable
EVSE Cordset will not allow charging while the fault
indicator is red. If it is off, the Portable EVSE Cordset has
not detected any internal faults, or faults with the vehicle
connection. If the Fault Indicator is flashing red, there is a
fault detected either with the Portable EVSE Cordset,
electronics, or with the vehicle connection. The Portable
EVSE Cordset may attempt to retry to provide current to
the vehicle if the fault is cleared. If the Fault Indicator does
not attempt to provide charge to the vehicle, the charge
connector will need to be removed from the vehicle to clear
the fault.
The fault code list in the table below provides a reference
for the important faults that are detected by the Portable
EVSE Cordset. When a fault is detected, the AC Power
Indicator, the Fault Indicator, or both the AC Power and
Fault Indicators will flash red. If only the AC Power
Indicator is red, there is a problem on the AC Power side of
the unit. If only the Fault Indicator is flashing red, there is
a problem internal to the unit or with the vehicle. If both
the AC Power and Fault Indicators are flashing red, an over
temperature condition is detected at either the AC plug or
within the enclosure. Additional information about the
faults is provided by a fault code that is displayed on the
two green Charge Rate Indicators. The fault code consists
of four digits, each with a value of 1 or 2. The value of a
digit is the number of indicators illuminated for that part of
the sequence. For example, fault code (1, 2, 1, 1) will
display the following sequence: One indicator will illuminate for (0.3 seconds), then two indicators will illuminate,
then one indicator, and finally one indicator will illuminate. After all four fault code digits have been displayed,
the indicators will remain off for one second before repeating the sequence.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
1, 2, 2, 2
AC Power
1, 1, 2, 1
AC Power
1, 1, 2, 2
AC Power
Incorrect Electrical
Supply
1, 2, 1, 1
AC Power
Incorrect Electrical
Supply
1, 2, 1, 2
AC Power
Incorrect Electrical
Supply
1, 2, 2, 1
AC Power
Outlet Wiring Bad
Ground
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication
Recommended Actions
Vehicle Current Draw
is Too High
Incorrect Electrical
Supply
Check Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
3
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
1, 1, 1, 1
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication
Recommended Actions
Fault
Portable EVSE Cordset
Internal Fault
1, 1, 1, 2
Fault
Portable EVSE Cordset
Internal Fault
1, 2, 1, 1
Fault
1, 2, 1, 2
Fault
Portable EVSE Cordset
Internal Fault
CCID Leakage Current
Detected
Unplug the Portable EVSE Cordset from the vehicle charge inlet
and retry to charge. If the issue is not corrected, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
Unplug the Portable EVSE Cordset from the vehicle charge inlet
and retry to charge. If the issue is not corrected, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
Check Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
2, 2, 2, 1
Fault
Vehicle Interface
Connector
2, 2, 2, 2
Fault
Vehicle Interface
Connector
Disconnect charge connector and retry charging. If problem persists, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service
location.
Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check for
water or other contamination in the vehicle charge inlet or
charge connector.
Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check for
water or other contamination in the vehicle charge inlet or
charge connector.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
1, 1, 2, 1
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication
Recommended Actions
Fault & AC
Power
EVSE Enclosure Internal Temperature is Too
High
1, 1, 1, 2
Fault & AC
Power
Hot AC Power Plug
Warning
1, 1, 1, 1
Fault & AC
Power
AC Power Plug Over
Temperature
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset housing may be hot.
It is recommended to move the Portable EVSE Cordset out of
direct sun exposure. Allow the unit to cool. If error persists,
check the Portable EVSE Cordset at a service location.
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset AC Power Plug may
be hot. It is recommended to carefully unplug the unit from the
wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to charge the
vehicle at a different wall outlet. Contact a certified electrician
to inspect/replace the wall outlet that was associated with the
Hot AC Plug event. Charging will still occur, but at a reduced
rate.
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset AC Power Plug may
be hot. It is recommended to carefully unplug the unit from the
wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to charge the
vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a certified electrician to
inspect/replace the outlet that was associated with the Hot AC
Plug event.
3
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FCC Notice:
This unit has systems that operate on a radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
This unit complies with ICES-003E of Industry Canada,
and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
• Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
• Do not allow children to operate this device. Adult
supervision is mandatory when children are in proximity when the charging cordset is in use.
NOTE: During normal operation, the charge connector or
AC plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during
charging, unplug the charging cordset and have a qualified
electrician inspect the wall receptacle before you continue
charging.
WARNING!
Do not use the charging cordset with a receptacle that
is worn or damaged. Using the charging cordset with a
worn or damaged receptacle may cause burns or start a
fire.
Guidelines for preventing fire and electric shock:
• Ensure the charging cable is positioned so it will not be
stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to
damage or stress.
• There are no user serviceable parts inside.
• Do not use the charging cordset if it is visibly damaged.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Vehicle Charge Indicators
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Gauge
There is a battery gauge indicator located on the instrument cluster. The battery gauge displays, with progressive
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
color indication, the current state of charge for the high
voltage battery; with the percentage value located at the
bottom of the gauge.
• charge low — displayed at 11% (Displayed for six
seconds).
3
Charge Low Message
High Voltage Battery Gauge
Charge Low And Limited Power Messages
The state of charge is monitored during normal operation.
If the state of charge reaches certain thresholds the following messages display on the cluster:
• charge low — displayed at 17% (warning displayed for
six seconds).
• charge low limited power mode — turtle displayed at
5% and remains on.
• charge low limited power mode — turtle flashes at 0%
until condition changes.
NOTE: The limited power mode can also be activated if the
high voltage battery temperature is too high or too low.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Charge Low Limited Power Mode
State Of Charge Indicator
NOTE: At 0% state of charge or below the following
features will be disabled if in use:
The state of charge indicator represents the current state of
charge for the high voltage battery. The state of charge
indicator lights quickly to identify the battery state of
charge while the vehicle is being charged. Each light
represents the battery’s current percentage of charge.
• Heated Seats
• Electronic Speed Control
• Climate Controls
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery gauge your vehicle is equipped
with a visual state of charge indicator. The state of charge
indicator is made up of five lights that are mounted to the
center of the instrument panel.
NOTE: In the event of an error in the charging process the
outer two lights will blink.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
1
2
3
4
5
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Light
Lights
Lights
Lights
Lights
Percent Of Battery Charge
NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
0 – 20%
21 – 40%
41 – 60%
61 – 80%
81 – 100%
• Charging Station – Check the indications and instructions at the charging station.
AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp)
AC Level 2 (240V) charging requires a 240V, Level 2 EVSE
(Charging station). A 30A Level 2 EVSE for home installation is recommended.
When using public charging stations, ensure the charging
station is ready to provide charge and the vehicle is in
PARK before the charge connector is plugged into the
vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and is coupled with
the vehicle’s charge inlet. The vehicle should start charging
automatically. If not, please check the instructions at the
charging station.
• Charging Schedule – Check whether the charging schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is currently
within the scheduled charge time/date. If the charging
schedule is enabled, you may override them for this
charging event by plugging in the charge connector,
unplugging it, and then plugging it back into the vehicle
charge inlet. Complete the double plug sequence within
ten seconds for it to override the set schedule.
To stop the charging process, disconnect the charge connector from the vehicle inlet.
NOTE: Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may
not support charging of your EV. If your vehicle doesn’t
charge, it may be connected to a non-compliant Level 2
EVSE and flashes the indicators. Please identify this failure
to the site operator or EVSE provider.
3
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Charge Times
KEYS
The following factors determine the time it takes to charge
the high voltage battery:
Key With Remote Control
• The high voltage battery’s current state of charge
• What level EVSE is being used (Level 1 – 120V or Level
2 – 240V)
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob contains an
integrated key. To use the mechanical key, simply push the
mechanical key release button.
• Ambient temperature
• Whether the vehicle is (keyed) on during charging
NOTE:
• The charging times are estimates based on a completely
discharged high voltage battery.
• Charging times will vary based on the age, condition,
state of charge and temperature of the high voltage
battery.
• Charging times may be longer if a thermal selfprotection reduces the charging current from the EVSE.
Type of Charge
Level 1 (120V/15A)
Level 2 (240V/30A)
Estimated Charge Time
Approximately 23 hours
Approximately 4 hours
Mechanical Key Release Button
1 — Mechanical Key Release
Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Liftgate Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
• The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
• When exiting the vehicle, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
1. Insert the key with either side up.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to
unlock all doors, and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
Locking Doors With A Key
2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
3
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push mechanical release button to open the mechanical
key.
2. Turn the screw to unlock using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case and replace the battery making
sure that polarities are correct.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key and lock it turning
the screw to lock.
NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of as
specified by law, see an authorized dealer for assistance
needed.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Key Fob Components
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Mechanical Key
Mechanical Key Release Button
Battery
Battery Case
Screw
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact an
authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to eight remote controls.
Should a new remote control be necessary, go to an
authorized dealer, taking an ID document and the car
ownership documents.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
General Information
IGNITION SWITCH
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Mechanical Ignition Switch
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The ignition switch can be turned to three different positions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• STOP: the vehicle is off, and the key can be removed.
Some electrical devices (e.g. sound system, central door
locking system, etc.) can operate.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: The transmission must be placed in PARK before
the key is turned to the STOP position. Then, the key can be
removed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• AVV: vehicle start-up.
• MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled.
3
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the key is turned to the STOP position before shifting into
park, the key will have to be moved to the driving (MAR)
position and back to STOP. Then, the key can be removed.
Ignition Switch
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, place the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector buttons.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is in the OFF/LOCK
position, a signal sounds to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the vehicle. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned to
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that there
is a problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
3
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Replacement Keys
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a
Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle
keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed,
interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light on the
instrument panel will flash.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
To Arm The System
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of
the vehicle.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry key fob and close all
doors.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
3. The horn will sound and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will switch on for approximately
three seconds. This shows that the vehicle security
alarm is about to arm. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or
the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
vehicle security alarm will automatically disarm. After
approximately three seconds, the vehicle security light
will flash. This shows that the vehicle security alarm is
fully armed.
The activation of the vehicle security alarm is followed by
a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time.
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors, hood
and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the system.
If the vehicle security alarm sounds the horn a second time
even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly closed,
a fault has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact
an authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE: The vehicle security alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain
in the vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob, once the
vehicle security alarm is armed, when you pull the door
handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the
unlock button on the key fob to disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
3
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to break-in
attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device each
time you park your car.
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by quickly
double-pushing the lock button on the key fob.
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are
not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate,
preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passenger compartment by entering the car through, and then
closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
1. By pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
2. By turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
Safe Lock Device Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
DOORS
Manual Lock
To lock each door from the inside, push the inside door
handle toward the door until the red lock indicator is
visible. To unlock the doors from the inside, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or until the lock symbol is no
longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Lock/Unlock Switch
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
3
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the
key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver
door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed, a
red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle
(indicating locked). When the door is closed, the door will
lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle,
the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door
handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition.
Power Door Lock Handle
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
SEATS
Manual Adjustment Front Seats
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
WARNING!
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Adjusting Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position is reached. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
3
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the
lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever
downward to lower the seat height.
Height Adjuster
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side
of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline lever,
lean back until the desired position has been reached, and
release the lever.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback, dump
the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward to allow
access in and out of the rear seat.
3
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the release
EZ Entry Lever
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to its
locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Memory Seat Feature
Both front seats have a memory feature, which can operate
in two ways:
• Memory Function Option 1 (Full Seat Back And Track
Fore/Aft Position Memory) — After using the EZ entry
function, the seatback angle and the track fore/aft
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were
most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the
seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position
on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright.
• Memory Function Option 2 (Seat Back Only Memory) —
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
be returned upright prior to going back to the last fore/aft
(memory) position on the tracks. This results in the seat
back memory being set only – The track will then be
locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory position. To
then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
position as described in Memory Function Option 1.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats.
Push the switch a second time to shut the heating
elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Manual Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard top
of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-down
position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When
returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
3
Folded Rear Seats
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Rear Seat Release Buttons
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The driver and front passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact, the
Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
WARNING!
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see an authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
3
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information on tether
routing.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the
left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Tilt Control Lever
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
3
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The on/off
symbol on the button will illuminate when the autodimming feature is enabled.
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in REVERSE.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Power Button
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select switch to either the L (left) or R
(right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward.
Power Mirror Switches
3
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The headlights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward
to the first detent for headlight operation.
Spotter Mirror
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using
the display menus. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on
the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
Headlight Operation
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn
on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
3
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a
maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Fog Light Switch
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and
hold it for more than two seconds.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Turn Signals
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn
or downward to signal a left turn. The corresponding
indicator in the instrument cluster display will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Turn Signal Operation
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when the
turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned
to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side of
the overhead console controls the map or reading function
of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn on the
right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left
light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch
is in the center position or that the lights are off to
avoid draining the battery.
3
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
Dimmer Control
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by pushing the buttons on the right side of the
instrument cluster. The (+) button increases the brightness
and the (-) button decreases the brightness. You can control
brightness of the radio by itself or the entire instrument
panel. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
more information.
• When one door is opened, a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within two
minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10 second
timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the key fob, the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
When all doors are closed a 15-minute timer is activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the center
stack. The ambient light will be on when the headlights are
turned on by rotating the end of the multifunction lever.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Cargo Area Lights
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There is also a courtesy light located in the rear cargo area.
Whenever the rear lift gate is opened, the light will turn on
and then turn off when the lift gate is closed.
There are four different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Cargo Light Location
Windshield Wiper Operation
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Low Speed
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column.
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers
will operate at low speed.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Off
CAUTION! (Continued)
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent, but
wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As
vehicle speed increases, the delay time will decrease.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate
automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
(Continued)
turning off the vehicle. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically shut off.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for
intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield
wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/
washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the
same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
frequency. When the transmission is placed into REVERSE,
the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and
return to normal operation when the transmission is placed
out of REVERSE.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and hold
the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
Rear Wiper Operation
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” in this section for more information.
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Rear Defrost
Button
Description
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode
is turned off then the climate system returns the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after a short period of time.
Blower Control Up And Down Buttons
Provides the occupants with blower control. Push the UP button to increase blower speed. Push
the DOWN button to decrease blower speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Icon
Description
Modes Control: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets. To access this mode, press both the Panel
and Floor Mode buttons.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
3
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Mix Mode
Description
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Off Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Temperature Up And Down Button
Provides the occupants with temperature control. Push the Up button for warmer temperature
settings. Push the Down button for cooler temperature settings.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Climate Control Functions
Recirculation
A/C (Air Conditioning)
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
3
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Operating Tips
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature.
The vehicle cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against vehicle overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low
until the vehicle warms up. The blower increases in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Summer Operation
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the vehicle cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This ensures adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE: If the vehicle is parked and off charge for longer
than two months, the 12V battery should be disconnected.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your A/C
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window controls are located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the driver
and passenger door windows. The window controls will
operate when the ignition switch is in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
Power Window Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the overhead
console.
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push
the window switch for approximately one second, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up
or down direction and release the switch. To open the
window part way, pull the window switch briefly, and
release the switch when the window is in the desired
position.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
Power Sunroof Switch
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
To Open
Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the
vented position. Push the switch a second time and hold
for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
second to completely close the sunroof.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Emergency Operation
Manual Sun Shade
In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove compartment. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof
opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug
reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof.
Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the
desired location.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
Hood Safety Latch Location
3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left
side when standing in front of the hood) of the underhood compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole
of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
Hood Release Lever
2. Slide the safety catch under the front edge of the hood,
near the center, to the right. Then raise the hood.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Closing
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Hood Prop Rod
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
3
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Cupholders
Storage
Front Cupholders
Glove Compartment
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are located
on the floor console between the front seats.
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Front Cupholders
Glove Compartment Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Rear Cupholders
Sun Visors
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visors can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. To view the
courtesy mirror, slide the mirror cover outward.
Rear Cupholders
Slide Courtesy Mirror Cover Outward (Passenger Side
Shown)
3
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Power Outlets
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, located
in the floor console, for added convenience. This power
outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low
power devices.
Center Stack Power Outlet
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
(Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
vehicle from moving.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being charged (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle will likely need to
be charged.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the power
door lock switches located on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle and
pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle
NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening
the liftgate in cold weather.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Instrument Cluster Display And Controls. . . . . . .87
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Display Menu Set-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .100
▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
4
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Battery Charge Gauge
• This gauge indicates the charge level of the battery.
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display shows messages, when
the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus.
You can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
4. Power Flow Gauge
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
This gauge indicates how battery energy is being used by
the vehicle:
• ECO Mode (Green): The vehicle is conserving energy.
• POWER Mode (Red): The vehicle is utilizing energy.
• CHARGE Mode (Purple): The vehicle is regenerating
energy.
Instrument Cluster Display And Controls
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. The instrument cluster display is designed to display important
information about the vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument
panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings when they
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
4
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
• Range
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The instrument cluster display control buttons are located
on the right side of the instrument cluster. There are three
control buttons that are used to navigate through the
instrument cluster display functions:
• Up Button
• Down Button
• MENU Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to return to the main
screen.
Push and release the Up button to scroll upward through
the displayed menu and the related options or to increase
the displayed value.
Push and release the Down button to scroll downward
through the displayed menu and the related options or to
decrease the value displayed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
NOTE: The Up and Down buttons activate different functions according to the following situations:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
• Button Volume
• Stored Warnings
• Tutorial
• Connectivity ID
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the instrument cluster display will turn on the clock and the miles or
kilometers covered (if equipped) for a few seconds.
• Restore Factory Settings
NOTE: When the Uconnect “Display Mode” feature is set
to “Auto”, the instrument cluster display Up and Down
control buttons may be used to adjust the brightness of the
entire Instrument Panel (e.g. Instrument Cluster, Radio,
and Climate Controls). Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu:
Display Menu Set-Up
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow to
access the different options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU
button. Single pushes on the up arrow or down arrow will
scroll through the setup menu options. The menu includes
the following functions:
• Battery % Display
• Exit Menu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.
4
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
setup menu.
4. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu
option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
displays trip information such as: average speed, distance
traveled, average energy, time traveled, motor power, and
tire pressure.
Trip Button
The TRIP button is located on the right steering column
stalk.
Trip Button
• A short button push scrolls through the user-selectable
information.
• A long button push resets.
The User-Selectable options are:
• Motor Power (Kilowatts)
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Tire Pressure
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
New Trip
• Avg. Speed
To reset:
• Elapsed Time (Driving Time)
• Push and hold the TRIP button manually.
Values Displayed
• When the “Trip Distance” reaches 9999.9 miles/
kilometers or when the “Elapsed Time” reaches 29.59 (29
hours and 59 minutes) the system will reset automatically.
Range
• Trip can also be reset remotely through the radio.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Distance
• Avg. Energy
• Avg. Speed
• Elapsed Time (Driving Time)
This indicates the distance which may be travelled with the
remaining battery charge, assuming that driving conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear when
the system is initializing.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving style,
type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, etc.),
conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip
planning must take into account the above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Speed
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a function
of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
• Distance
Average Energy
• Avg. Energy
This value shows the vehicle’s average energy consumption as a function of the overall time elapsed since the last
reset.
4
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging
properly. If it stays on while the vehicle is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
4
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left
open and not fully closed.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is open and
not fully closed.
— Plugged In Malfunction Indicator Light
This warning light will illuminate red if there is a malfunction or interruption during the vehicle charging process.
This warning light will also appear red alongside a “Charging Interrupted” message in the Instrument Cluster Display.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Service Propulsion System Warning Light
The Service Propulsion System Warning Light will illuminate if there is a malfunction detected with the Propulsion
System. If the light comes on or remains on while driving
see your authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic
Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the vehicle running.
If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the vehicle running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
4
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— External Light Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a
failure to one of the following lights is detected:
• Direction Indicators
• Backup Lights
• Parking Lights
• Daytime Running Lights
• License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
(Continued)
4
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Immobilizer Vehicle Theft Alarm Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
— Regenerative Brake System (RBS) Indicator
Light
If the light turns on and remains on while driving, it
suggests that there is a potential problem with the Regenerative Brake System (RBS) and the need for system
service. See an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “Regenerative Braking System (RBS)” in “Safety”
for further information.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— EV System Malfunction Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when there is a malfunction
in the Electric Vehicle (EV) System. If the EV System
Malfunction Indicator light comes on while driving or
charging see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
— Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
CAUTION! (Continued)
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Plugged In Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged
in.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in
one of the exterior bulbs.
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
Green Indicator Lights
NOTE:
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is ON, but a speed has not been set.
4
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Multimedia” section.
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .122
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .102
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
5
102 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the fault
detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
(Continued)
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
SAFETY 103
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the
vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system
reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing
sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These
occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is
functioning properly.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake
control system that includes the Brake Assist System (BAS),
Traction Control System (TCS), and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure
is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and vehicle power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
5
104 SAFETY
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and
ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Vehicle
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to
determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located on the instrument
panel.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
(Continued)
SAFETY 105
WARNING! (Continued)
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as
noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC Off
switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily pushing the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode
by pushing the switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to
be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome, turn ESC
back on by momentarily pushing the switch. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the motor power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
5
106 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the vehicle operating running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when
TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.
Regenerative Braking System (RBS)
Your 500e has a Regenerative Braking System
(RBS). The RBS reduces the high voltage battery
consumption of the vehicle, particularly in stopand-go city traffic. The electric motors which
propel the vehicle forward can operate as generators when
braking. The RBS recharges the high voltage battery under
certain braking conditions by recapturing energy that
would otherwise be lost while braking. The electric power
that is generated goes back into the high voltage battery for
later use, for example when acceleration is desired.
SAFETY 107
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes, regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the vehicle. If
the system detects slippery conditions while braking,
ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle. The RBS can
result in extended life of the hydraulic service brakes;
however, all inspection, scheduled maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle service brakes must be followed.
Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
5
108 SAFETY
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
SAFETY 109
• Under-inflation also reduces the high voltage battery
range and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
• It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and
to maintain the proper pressure.
TPM System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
5
110 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more
of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a low pressure graphic showing the
low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message in the instrument cluster for
approximately five seconds.
Low Tire Indicator
SAFETY 111
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replacement tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.
Service TPM System Message
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the “Service TPM System”
message will no longer display.
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the highlighted
graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a low
pressure text message and a pressure value in a different
color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
message.
5
112 SAFETY
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a “Service TPM System” message.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
SAFETY 113
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
5
114 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
SAFETY 115
Change of Status
Lap/Shoulder Belts
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
5
116 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
(Continued)
SAFETY 117
WARNING! (Continued)
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
5
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
118 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Positioning The Lap Belt
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
SAFETY 119
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Seat Belt Extender
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
5
120 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
SAFETY 121
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
5
122 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
SAFETY 123
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/
OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
5
124 SAFETY
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
SAFETY 125
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
5
126 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
SAFETY 127
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
5
128 SAFETY
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
SAFETY 129
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
5
130 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
SAFETY 131
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Rollover Events
• Air Bag Warning Light
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
5
132 SAFETY
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
SAFETY 133
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
5
134 SAFETY
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After an event occurs requiring activation of the Enhanced
Accident Response System, when the system is active, a
“Service Electrical System” message will be displayed on
the instrument cluster. The vehicle is not drivable in this
state and must be towed to an authorized dealer immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced Accident
Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
SAFETY 135
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
5
136 SAFETY
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call
1-888-327-4236.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm.
SAFETY 137
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining
Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
5
138 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
(Continued)
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
SAFETY 139
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
5
140 SAFETY
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
SAFETY 141
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
5
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
142 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the comweight of the child restraint) for using the
bined weight of the child and the child restraint is
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchild restraint?
chor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
belt be used together to attach a rearanchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can two child restraints be attached usNo
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
ing a common lower LATCH anchorage?
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use
the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
the back of the front passenger seat?
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
SAFETY 143
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they interfere with the installation
of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
5
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
144 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
SAFETY 145
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
5
146 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
SAFETY 147
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
5
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
148 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be reYes
The head restraints can be removed
moved?
in every seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an
path of the child restraint?
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
SAFETY 149
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
5
150 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
SAFETY 151
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
(Continued)
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
5
152 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Seat Belts
Defroster
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
SAFETY 153
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using the
• ALWAYS securely attach
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any other
FROM THE VEHICLE
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
154 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
coolant or other fluid leaks. If fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Single-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
䡵 SINGLE–SPEED TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Rear Park Assist Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Auto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . .170
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .170
䡵 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
6
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .175
䡵 EXTENDING YOUR DRIVING RANGE PER
CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Driver Behavior Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Range Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
STARTING PROCEDURES
Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Turn the key to the START position while your vehicle is in
PARK. When the ignition key is turned to the START and
then released to the RUN position, a chime will sound and
the “READY” indicator in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate to indicate the 500e’s Electric Drive System
has started. When the “READY” indicator is illuminated
your 500e is ready to be driven.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
6
Single-Speed Transmission
The transmission must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the vehicle. Apply the brakes
when selecting a transmission gear from Park.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before selecting a
transmission gear.
“READY” Indicator
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If the key is held in the START position for more than 10
seconds “READY” mode will not be achieved. Return
the key to the OFF position, and then back to the START
position and hold for less than 10 seconds to achieve
“READY”.
• If the “READY” indicator fails to illuminate after you
have followed the normal starting procedure contact an
authorized dealer.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission push buttons.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury.
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
6
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
SINGLE–SPEED TRANSMISSION
Your 500e uses a Single-Speed Transmission to direct the
output from the electric motor. The single-speed transmission is operated using push-buttons instead of a traditional
gear selector.
The push-buttons are located on the lower instrument
panel.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Place the transmission into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Place the transmission into or out of REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Before placing the transmission into any range make
sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
• You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
in or out of PARK.
• If all push-button LEDs are on when the key is ON, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Single-Speed Transmission Push-Buttons
• Only place the transmission into gear when your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
WARNING! (Continued)
should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle is in
“READY” mode. Before exiting a vehicle, always
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission range buttons.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. The key can
only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in
the OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK.
Gear Ranges
Push the desired push button to shift into gear.
NOTE:
• The brake pedal must be depressed to select a transmission gear.
• After selecting any gear, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating.
PARK (P)
The PARK selection supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The vehicle can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle
in PARK.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
6
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the transmission into PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the vehicle OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
NOTE: Refer to the transmission range position displayed
in the instrument cluster and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
WARNING! (Continued)
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal. The
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift the transmission
into gear when your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running or the propulsion system is active. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the ignition OFF, and remove the key
fob. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission range buttons.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
REVERSE (R)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
DRIVE (D)
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this gear for all city and highway driving.
The vehicle may be started in this gear. Apply the parking
brake and place the transmission into PARK if you must
exit the vehicle.
Auto Park
The Auto Park feature automatically places the transmission into PARK if there is any indication that the driver
may exit the vehicle while the transmission is in D
(DRIVE), N (NEUTRAL) or R (REVERSE).
6
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
Auto Park is enabled under the following condition:
POWER STEERING
• Key On (12 Volt ON and High Voltage OFF) or READY
mode (12 Volt ON and High Voltage ON).
• Auto Park is enabled (only once) at the beginning of
each key cycle and is re-enabled each time the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
The instrument cluster will display an Auto Shift To Park
message and chime once when Auto Park is activated.
WARNING!
NOTE:
Mode Of Operation With Key ON:
Auto Park will be engaged when the transmission is in
DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE and the following conditions are detected:
• Seat Belt is unlatched
• Brake pedal is released
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h)
Mode Of Operation With Key OFF:
Auto Park will be engaged when the transmission is in
DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE and the vehicle speed is
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING” message is displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers
may have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEERING
- ASSIST OFF⬙ messages are displayed on the instrument
cluster screen, the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
6
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control system can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate
To Vary The Speed Setting
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
To Increase Speed
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
Using Speed Control On Hills
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
6
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
Rear Park Assist Sensors
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the center
of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from
the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
REAR PARK ASSIST
The Rear Park Assist system provides audible and visual
indications of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System Usage
Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the
audible alert becomes more frequent.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or
right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance
from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous
tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches (30
cm) away.
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL
Obstacle Distance
MEANING
An obstacle is present within
the sensors’ field of view
Failure
Sensor or System failures
INDICATION
Audible Signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as
the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information).
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the instrument cluster
display (if equipped).
6
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition
occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after
3 seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel
to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is
indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument panel warning icon and message appearing on
the instrument cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
appears on the instrument cluster display. Refer
to ⬙Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated
immediately if they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable,
without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even
a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled.
The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING! (Continued)
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
(Continued)
6
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless one of the following conditions occurs:
• The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
• The gear selector is moved to PARK.
• The soft button “Image defeat [X]” to disable the image
is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
6
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Curb Weight
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids at full capacity conditions, and
with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined by
weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
6
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
Single-Speed Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• This vehicle must be towed on a dolly or vehicle trailer
with the front wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
• Keep tires properly inflated.
Shallow Standing Water
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and
Warning before doing so.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., transmission, coolant,
etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may
(Continued)
6
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
result in further damage. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
EXTENDING YOUR DRIVING RANGE PER CHARGE
The drive system and cabin temperature management
features use the most energy from the high voltage battery.
Reducing energy draw from these features are the easiest
and most effective way to extend driving range.
The 500e uses high voltage components to heat and cool
the cabin, so when using automatic climate control, consider setting temperatures a few degrees higher or lower
during hot and cold days. If your 500e has been soaking in
hot or cold temperatures for an extended period, it is
recommended that the car be preconditioned using the
Uconnect smartphone app (not available in Canada) while
still plugged into a charging source. This will allow 500e to
use external power to establish a comfortable cabin temperature before the drive and allow the battery to maintain
the temperature at significantly lower energy levels.
Additional tips:
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• When practical, choose surface streets over the highway,
and work to maintain a steady speed.
• Avoid carrying nonessential cargo.
• Be mindful of adding external accessories that may
increase aerodynamic drag.
• Perform all scheduled maintenance at recommended
intervals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Driver Behavior Gauge
• Charge
To help the driver extend the driving range of the high
voltage battery your vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Behavior Gauge. The Driver Behavior Gauge is located on
the right side of the instrument cluster and contains three
driving ranges:
The needle will move into the Charge range when battery
regeneration is active (either coasting or braking).
• Power
The needle will move into the Power range when under
acceleration.
6
• ECO
The needle will move into the ECO range when you are
maximizing the driving range of the high voltage battery.
Driver Behavior Gauge
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Range Projection
This area of the cluster is used to display the projected
range considering current battery charge and previous
energy use. The two arrows to the left of the mileage are
used to forecast the effect of recent driving.
Range Projection Indicators
• When both arrows are grey, expect the range to drop
approximately one mile for each mile driven.
• When the up arrow is highlighted, expect the range
number to hold steady or increase while driving.
• When the down arrow is highlighted, expect the range
number to decrease more than one mile for each mile
driven.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE (12 VOLT BATTERY
ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Interior Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Power Distribution Center #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Power Distribution Center #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .195
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .208
7
182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Overhead Lamp
Courtesy Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamps
Bulb Number
C5W
W5W
W5W
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 183
Exterior Bulbs
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Side Direction Lamps
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Rear Side Marker Lamps
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
License Plate Lamps
Bulb Number
HIR2LL
W21/5W
H11LL
W3W
WY21W
WY5W
PY21W
W3W
P21/5W
W16W
LED (See authorized dealer)
LED (See authorized dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
Wheel Housing Access Door
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 185
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see an authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access
to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement
bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
7
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from the
lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Interior Bulbs
WARNING! (Continued)
Rear Cargo Lamp
1. Using a suitable tool open the light box.
2. Pull the bulb out.
3. Replace the bulb, and reinstall the light box cover.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
(Continued)
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 187
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
7
Fuse Panel
1
2
Vehicle Fuse
Number
F12
F32
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
3
4
5
F53
F38
F36
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
6
F43
20 Amp Yellow
Cavity
Mini Fuse
Description
Right Low Beam
Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
Instrument Panel Node
Central Door Locking
Diagnostic Socket, Climate Control System,
Tire Pressure Monitor, TCU
Bi-Directional Washer
188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Mini Fuse
Description
7
8
9
10
Vehicle Fuse
Number
F48
F13
F50
F51
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
11
12
F37
F49
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
13
14
F31
F47
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
Passenger Power Window
Left Low Beam
Airbag
Climate Control System, Stop Light, Exterior
Mirrors, Sunroof Switch
Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
Exterior Mirror, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor, Sunroof Switch
Ignition, Climate Control, RDU and EVCU
Driver Power Window
Cavity
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 189
The fuse for the heated mirrors is located behind an access
panel on the front of the Instrument Panel.
NOTE: This fuse is a single fuse attached directly to the
wire harness.
7
F90 Fuse Location
1 — Heated Mirror Fuse
Cavity
F90
2 — Access Panel
Mini Fuse
5 Amp Tan
Description
Heated Mirrors
190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Power Distribution Center #1
The Power Distribution Center #1 is located on the right
side of the underhood compartment. To access the fuses,
remove locking screw and slide cover off.
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding
to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
Cavity
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
Maxi Fuse
60 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Orange
70 Amp Tan
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Body Control Module (BCM)
Audio Amplifier
Ignition Switch
Brake System Module Pump
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 191
Cavity
F06
F07
F08
F09
Maxi Fuse
60 Amp Blue
40 Amp Orange
40 Amp Orange
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
F10
F11
F14
F15
F16
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F18
F19
F20
F21
F23
F24
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
7.5 Amp Brown
F30
–
15 Amp Blue
Description
Radiator Fan
Regen Brake Module
HVAC
Air Electric Heater
Charge Indicator
Horn
Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU)
High Beam (Shutter)
Cigar Lighter, AUX Power Outlet
Humidity Sensor
VPAM
AC Compressor
Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU)
HVAC
Heated Seats – If Equipped
Radio
Anti-Lock Brake Valves
EPS
YAW Sensor
Fog Lamps
7
192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F81
F82
F84
F85
F87
Maxi Fuse
30 Amp Green
30 Amp Green
–
30 Amp Green
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
5 Amp Tan
Description
Electronic Shifter (ESM)
Sunroof
Regen Brake Module
Rear Window Heater
Electronic Shifter (ESM)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193
Power Distribution Center #2
The Power Distribution Center #2 is located next to the
battery in the underhood compartment. To access the fuses,
pull the release tabs and remove the cover.
7
PDC #2
Cavity
FPT9
Maxi Fuse
–
Mini Fuse
15 Amp Blue
FPT13
–
10 Amp Red
FPT16
FPT17
–
–
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
FPT20
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Battery Pack Control Module (BPCM)
Power Inverter Module (PIM)
EAC (AC Compressor)
On Board Charging Module (OBCM)
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
EAC (AC Compressor)
Radiator Fan
Electronic Vehicle Control Unit
(EVCU)
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
FPT3
FPT5
FPT6
Cartridge Fuse
25 Amp White
20 Amp Lt. Blue
40 Amp Green
Description
Battery Coolant Pump
Inverter Coolant Pump
Supply for fuses F9, F13, F16, F17 and
F20
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear cargo area.
Tire Service Kit Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (5) when selecting this
mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select
Knob
3 — Sealant Hose
(Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose
(Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle
Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear
hose) (3) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (1) once to
turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the
Power Button (1) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (9) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
7
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
Hose (3) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
upper right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (5) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (2) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
7
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (3) and (5) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (3) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the vehicle before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (1), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (4) through the
Sealant Hose (3) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (3):
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (3) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (3) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
Select Knob (2) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (1) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose (3).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (3):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through the hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (3),
the Pressure Gauge (8) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8
Bar). The Pressure Gauge (8) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (8).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (4) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (3) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
7
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “(A) Whenever You
Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (8).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3)
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle release
button at the lower right hand corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release button, then
pull out the bottle holding the button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (3) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then push the bottle into the housing by holding
the button. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place. Release the button.
7
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (3) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on top of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE (12 VOLT BATTERY
ONLY)
If your vehicle has a discharged 12 Volt battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the underhood
compartment under the beauty cover. To access the battery
pull upward on the cover.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Positive Battery Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
1. Apply the parking brake, place the transmission into
PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
7
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Once the vehicle is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good vehicle ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle underhood compartment) away
from the battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the vehicle that has the booster battery, and allow
it to idle for a few minutes. Then turn the key to the
RUN position on the vehicle with the discharged battery.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the vehicle ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death
for those in or around the vehicle.
3. Working from underneath the vehicle, remove the black
rubber plug from the front of the Park Module (a black
canister mounted on the front of the transmission).
4. Using a T25 driver bit, rotate the Manual Park Release
shaft (located just behind the rubber plug) clockwise, at
least 20 turns, to release the Park Mechanism. The
vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
7
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available. If a dead 12 volt battery
is the cause of the condition refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure — 12 Volt Battery” before performing the
Manual Park Release.
To perform the Manual Park Release follow these steps:
1. To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
firmly apply the parking brake.
2. If possible, raise the front driver’s side of the vehicle to
provide access to the transmission.
Manual Park Release Location
5. Reinstall the rubber plug.
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Release the parking brake only when a driver is in the
vehicle, or the vehicle is secured by other means. The
Manual Park Release will be reset automatically once
the vehicle is restarted.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the vehicle or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
This vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
ground.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Manual Park Release” within this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in
order to move the vehicle.
Single-Speed Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
7
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
䡵 UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Drain, Flush And
Refill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Disposal Of Used Power Electronics And Battery
Thermal Management Systems Coolant . . . . . . .221
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery 12 Volt . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Points To Remember. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Coolant Level Check . .217
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Cooling Pressure
Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Selection Of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
8
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .249
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Maintenance Plan
Once A Month Or Before A Trip:
Required Maintenance Intervals
• Check windshield washer fluid level
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoirs and brake
master cylinder
•
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
•
•
•
At Every Service Interval:
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect battery cooling system protection and
hoses.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for
the required maintenance intervals.
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and replace
if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings. Replace
as necessary.
Inspect parking brake function.
Adjust as necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter.
Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
Flush and replace the coolant in
the Power Electronics and Battery
Thermal Loop Systems at 10
years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT
1 — Battery Thermal Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Fuses
5 — 12V Battery
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
Adding Washer Fluid
WARNING! (Continued)
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
underhood compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to
“Underhood Compartment” in this section for further
information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery 12 Volt
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free 12 Volt
battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
(Continued)
(Continued)
8
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a 12 Volt Low Voltage Battery System “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle,
disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Follow all Caution and Warning labels attached to
the High Voltage components.
• Do not remove or replace any of the 500e System
components. All replacement or repairs of 500e System components should be performed by a factorytrained technician at an authorized dealer.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
DEALER SERVICE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has both a high voltage DC and AC
system as well as a 12 Volt system. DC and AC high
voltage are both extremely dangerous and can cause
severe burns, electric shock, serious injury or even
death. In order to avoid personal injuries:
• DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
(ORANGE COLORED) AND/OR THE CONNECTORS.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage them. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component
malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the
flushing procedure.
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottles should be
between the bottom and top lines marked “MIN-MAX
FILL RANGE”.
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems
The Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management
Systems are completely separate and designed to regulate
temperature for the high voltage battery and the electric
components.
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Coolant Level Check
The coolant expansion bottles provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the vehicle off and coolant at ambient temperature,
8
Coolant MIN/MAX
As long as the vehicle operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottles need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottles.
Do not overfill.
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable).
Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum
of 50% Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) and
distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion protection.
Check the coolant bottles tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottles
and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Cooling Pressure Caps
The caps must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant
(antifreeze).
The caps should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
NOTE:
• The pressure caps on the reservoirs are unique and rated
at 5 PSI (34.5 kPa).
• Use only Mopar replacement parts.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add coolant (antifreeze) when the cooling
system is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated cooling system. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or vehicle
damage may result.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze), may result in cooling system damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
8
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with cooling systems that allow
extended maintenance intervals. This coolant (antifreeze)
can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze).
When adding coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34ºF (-37ºC)
are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water and coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the cooling systems.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the proper level of protection against freezing according to
the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the
life of the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems coolant (antifreeze) and will require more
frequent coolant (antifreeze) changes.
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Drain, Flush And Refill
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
If the coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old coolant
(antifreeze) solution.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
CAUTION!
It is recommended to have the cooling systems serviced at your authorized dealer. Failure to do so could
result in poor cooling system performance and/or vehicle damage.
Disposal Of Used Power Electronics And Battery
Thermal Management Systems Coolant
Used antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine
the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store antifreeze in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground.
If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Points To Remember
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle OFF and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Do not put your hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
near the radiator cooling fan. The fan may start at any
time, whether the ignition is on or off.
If an examination of your underhood compartment shows
no evidence of cooler or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottles.
• Check coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the coolant
recovery bottles. If coolant (antifreeze) needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottles must also be
protected against freezing.
8
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If frequent coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or
if the level in the coolant recovery bottles does not drop
when the powertrain cools, the cooling system should be
pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% OAT
coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled/deionized
water for proper corrosion protection of your powertrain which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant control systems recovery
bottles overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the coolant control systems clean. If
your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the
front of the condenser clean.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and air conditioning performance tests.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
8
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward
unless the pivot cap is raised first.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the liftgate glass.
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
(Continued)
8
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot powertrain parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
8
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
8
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Energy Consumption
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Battery Consumption
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher battery charge consumption.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Tread Wear
CAUTION!
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
8
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the
tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
8
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
(Continued)
8
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
8
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
(Continued)
8
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires.
• Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire on a 15 x 6.0
x 35mm wheel with a Peerless Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
8
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
The front and rear wheels are different sizes and cannot be
used in place of each other. Rotate the wheels “side-toside” as shown in the diagram.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
Tire Rotation
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
8
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
The preferred way of storing your vehicle for a long period
of time is to leave it attached to a Level 1 or Level 2 charger.
The vehicle has a wake-up feature that will wake the
system every 3 weeks and do a maintenance charge on the
12 Volt battery and also top off the high voltage battery if
necessary.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
BODYWORK
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
What Causes Corrosion?
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
8
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
INTERIORS
WARNING!
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
8
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .254
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .255
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
9
254 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the
right front door sill, under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Vehicle Identification Number
In the event regenerative braking or power assist is lost for
any reason the brakes will still function. The effort required
to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 255
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake
use.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
256 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Torque Patterns
FLUID CAPACITIES
Systems
Power Electronics Cooling System
Battery Thermal Management Cooling System
Single-Speed Transmission
U.S.
3.6 Quarts
7.0 Quarts
0.8 Quart
Metric
3.4 Liters
6.6 Liters
750 ml
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 257
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component
Coolant
Brake Master Cylinder
Refrigerant
Compressor Lubricant
Single-Speed Transmission
Fluids And Lubricants
Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used.
Mopar R134a
Mopar POE Oil or Equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12727
Castrol BOT 533
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze), may result in cooling system damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
(Continued)
9
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Display Settings. . . . . . . . . .262
䡵 UCONNECT 3/3 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . .272
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .273
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 TELEMATICS MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .279
10
260 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 261
NOTE:
UCONNECT SETTINGS
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
10
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Display Buttons On The Touchscreen
And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
262 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3/3
NAV Display Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable feature
settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or push the back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the up or down arrow buttons on
the right side of the screen allows you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the “AVV/MAR” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Selectable Options
Auto
Manual
NOTE:
When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Auto” the radio touchscreen’s brightness will be adjusted with all other
instrument panel displays and lights when they are adjusted using the instrument cluster display buttons on the
right-hand side of the instrument cluster display. When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Manual” the radio
screen brightness can be adjusted independently using the “Brightness” feature below.
MULTIMEDIA 263
Setting Name
Brightness
Language
Touchscreen Beep
Charge Low Pop-Up
Selectable Options
+
English
On
On
–
Français
Español
Off
Off
NOTE:
When in the “Charge Low Pop-Up” display, you may turn on or shut off a low charge indicator.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable
units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
US
Metric
Selectable Options
Changes the instrument cluster display to US units of
measure.
Changes the instrument cluster display to Metric units of
measure.
10
264 MULTIMEDIA
After pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen,
you may select from the following menu items:
Setting Name
Distance
Pressure
Temperature
Energy
Selectable Options
mi
psi
°C
MPGe
mi/kWh
km
kPa
°F
km/kWH
KM/Le
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Long
With Help
Never
MULTIMEDIA 265
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time and Format
Selectable Options
12 hour
24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
Show Time Status
On
Off
Set Date
Set Date
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Sync Time — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE: When in the “Sync Time” display, you may sync the time with GPS.
10
266 MULTIMEDIA
Charging Schedule
To set up a charging schedule, press the “More” or “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
Setting Name
Enable Schedule
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
Continue setting up the schedule, picking from the following menus:
• Weekdays or Weekends
• Start and End Times
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Rear View Camera Delay
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines
Selectable Options
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
MULTIMEDIA 267
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed
Guide Lines
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Daytime Running Lights
Selectable Options
On
Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
10
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
268 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
Selectable Options
Driver
All
NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button,
you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Radio Off Delay
Selectable Options
0 min.
20 min.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Equalizer
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE:
• When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
• Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly
on the desired setting.
MULTIMEDIA 269
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Auto-On Radio
Selectable Options
When in the “Balance/ Fade” display, you may adjust the Balance settings.
On
Off
Recall Last
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Radio” feature is selected, the radio automatically turns on when the vehicle is in RUN or recalls
whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Radio Off With Door” feature is selected, the radio remains on until the driver or passenger door is
opened or when the Radio Off Delay time expires.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
10
Selectable Options
List of Paired Phones
NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
270 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: “Tune Start” begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will
miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
Subscription Information
Subscription Info
NOTE:
• New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
• Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
MULTIMEDIA 271
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
Yes
No
NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will
appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default⬙.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
10
Selectable Options
Yes
No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you
want to clear all personal data?” Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
272 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch between
the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/AUX/Media
Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/enter an item
while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
MULTIMEDIA 273
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is also equipped with a charge-only USB
power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics, and other low powered electrical accessories. This USB charging outlet is located inside the glove
compartment.
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB or AUX port, located on the center
console.
10
Glove Compartment Charge-Only USB Port
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
USB/AUX Port
1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack
2 — USB Connector
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
274 MULTIMEDIA
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation.
• Configure Scheduled Charging Profile
• Average and total energy used
General Information
• Charge station location and availability on in vehicle
NAV map
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• Send navigation destination to vehicle from within
Mobile App
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Remote Door Lock/Unlock
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• Pre-conditioning of interior temperature
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Email and SMS notifications
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Remote Horn and Lights Activation
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
TELEMATICS MODEM
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3G CDMA cellular modem
to connect the vehicle with your device to provide the
following features:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
• Range and State of Charge Information
MULTIMEDIA 275
UCONNECT 3/3 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV
10
276 MULTIMEDIA
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push
2 — Push
A Text
3 — Push
4 — Push
To MUTE
To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
To End Call
To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
Uconnect 3/3 NAV VR
MULTIMEDIA 277
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
and say
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and Auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices.
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to iPod”
• “ Change source to USB”
10
278 MULTIMEDIA
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for
the Uconnect 3/3 NAV radio, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
(if active) or VR button
Push the Phone
beep, say one of the following commands:
. After the
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
(if active) or VR button
and say “ Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone
book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “ Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Media
MULTIMEDIA 279
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Phone
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours
a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S.
Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
10
280 MULTIMEDIA
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .285
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .283
11
282 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 283
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242-6342
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
284 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 285
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
286 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Service Manuals
Call toll free at:
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
INDEX
12
288 INDEX
Adding Washing Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 208
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 123, 152
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Air Conditioner Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Air Pressure
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Alarm
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Alarm System
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 98, 99
Arming System
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 215
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Brake, Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
INDEX 289
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 182
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
AC Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
AC Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .145
Infant And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .141
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .138
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 71
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Cooling System
Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
12
290 INDEX
Daytime Running Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Dimmer Switch
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Electric Vehicle Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE). . . . . . . . . .24
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Engine
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . .133, 208
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 154
Filters
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Flashers
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 99, 154
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Fluids And Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . .257
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 60
Fold-Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 274
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
INDEX 291
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 58
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
High Voltage Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . .38, 42
. . . . . . . . . . . .41
. . . . . . . . . . . .36
. . . . . . . . . . . .42
. . . . . . . . . . . .41
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 61
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 182
12
292 INDEX
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 154
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 123, 152
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 99
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 60, 99, 154
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . .99
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Locks
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Lug Nuts/Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Manual
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Master Cylinder
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 58
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
INDEX 293
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 286
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .230
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 42
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Rear Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Restraints, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
12
Safety
Safety
Safety
Safety
Safety
Checks Inside Vehicle . .
Checks Outside Vehicle
Defects, Reporting . . . .
Information, Tire . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.152
.154
.285
.226
.152
294 INDEX
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 152
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115, 117
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Seat Belts Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Settings
Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 60, 99, 154
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Spare Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242, 243
Speed Control
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
INDEX 295
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag. . . . . . . . . .124
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Time Delay
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .230
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 234, 241, 247
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 241
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230, 231
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 234
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 243
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Tire Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . .194, 195, 196, 197, 200, 201
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Towing Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
12
296 INDEX
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 60, 99
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.261
.247
.119
.273
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 231
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Vehicle Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) . . . .95
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 76
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Wipers Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
19BEV-126-AA
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.